2015 Chrysler 200 Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2015-200

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 698 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

200
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL

2015 200
15UF-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A.
Information Provided by:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
Information Provided by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1INTRODUCTION .............................................................3
2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE .............................9
3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ............................115
4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................317
5STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................443
6WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ..............................................547
7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...............................................587
8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .................................................657
9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ........................................663
10 INDEX ....................................................................673
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵INTRODUCTION ........................4
䡵HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4
䡵WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6
䡵VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........6
䡵VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7
1
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) ..............12
▫KeyFob ............................13
▫Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........15
䡵SENTRY KEY® .........................16
▫Replacement Keys .....................17
▫Customer Key Programming ..............18
▫General Information ....................18
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
▫Rearming Of The System ................18
▫To Arm The System ....................19
▫To Disarm The System ..................19
▫Tamper Alert .........................20
▫Security System Manual Override ...........20
䡵ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................21
䡵REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........22
▫To Unlock The Doors ...................23
▫To Lock The Doors .....................24
▫To Unlatch The Trunk ...................24
▫Using The Panic Alarm ..................24
2
Information Provided by:
▫Programming Additional Transmitters .......25
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........25
▫General Information ....................27
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27
▫How To Use Remote Start ................28
䡵DOOR LOCKS .........................31
▫Manual Door Locks ....................31
▫Power Door Locks .....................32
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................34
䡵KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ .................36
䡵WINDOWS ...........................41
▫Power Windows .......................41
▫Wind Buffeting .......................44
䡵TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .............45
䡵TRUNK SAFETY WARNING................46
▫Trunk Emergency Release ................46
䡵OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS .........47
▫Seat Belt Systems ......................48
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........60
▫Child Restraints .......................86
▫Transporting Pets .....................108
䡵ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108
䡵SAFETY TIPS .........................109
▫Transporting Passengers .................109
▫Exhaust Gas .........................110
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................111
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle .........................113
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Information Provided by:
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙for further informa-
tion).
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four oper-
ating positions, three of which are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START,
during start RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Information Provided by:
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if the engine controller does not receive the
proper authorization codes from the body control mod-
ule.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
•Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
•The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Information Provided by:
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the head-
lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is cycled to the ⬙OFF⬙
position. (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙for further information).
2.
Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
•Push the LOCK button on the interior power door
lock switch panel with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
•Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob (RKE) available in
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-
Go™⬙in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙for further information).
•Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
•Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
•Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙for further
information).
•Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
•The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Information Provided by:
•The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the
alarm will sound.
•When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙position (extreme top position).
Manual Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Information Provided by:
•The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
(IGNM)
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Information Provided by:
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
•You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Information Provided by:
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
Emergency Key Removal Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
•Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•Shift lever in PARK
•Doors closed
•Hood closed
•Trunk closed
•Hazard switch off
•Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•Battery at an acceptable charge level
•RKE panic button not pushed
•System not disabled from previous remote start event
•Vehicle security alarm not active
•Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
•Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Messages on Your Instrument
Cluster - 3.5ⴖElectronic Vehicle Information
Cluster (EVIC) and 7ⴖDriver Information Display
(DID)
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
•Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
•Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
•Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
•Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
•Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
•Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
Button⬙(vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
will display in the instrument cluster until you push the
START button.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the trunk.
Manual Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and trunk.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Power Door Lock Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Information Provided by:
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
rear edge of the door.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar flat-
bladed object into the lock and rotate clockwise ap-
proximately one-quarter turn to the lock position or
counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated
by the stamped icons).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
Lock Child Protection Door Lock Unlock Child Protection Door Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Information Provided by:
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull the toggle lock by the door handle (UNLOCKED
position), roll down the window, and open the door with
the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
•If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
•If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” is
programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of
the drivers door handle. To select between “1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks All Doors” and “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door”, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side — If Equipped
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
All Doors” or “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver
Door.”)
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Information Provided by:
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
•The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
•The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
•The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
•Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the decklid, push the button located on the
light bar between the license plate lamps.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
decklid, the decklid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
decklid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
•The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Controls
1 — Window Lockout Switch
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Driver/Passenger Window Controls
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Information Provided by:
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Driver One Touch Down
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent
and release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
Express Down
Press the switch to the second detent and release. The
window will go down automatically.
Manual Down
Press and hold the switch to the first detent and release
when you want the window to stop.
Express Up
Lift the switch to the second detent and release. The
window will go up automatically.
Manual Up
Lift the switch to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
NOTE:
•If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Information Provided by:
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using
the external release switch located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release feature will function
only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The EVIC/DID display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in this section for more
information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry
feature.
Trunk Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Information Provided by:
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-
the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha-
nism.
Trunk Emergency Release
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•Seat Belt Systems
•Supplemental Restraints System (SRS) Air Bags
•Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions:
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints.”)
3. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-
sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used
to attach child restraints. For more information on
LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).
4. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints”) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
5. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Information Provided by:
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
7. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
9. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door and you could be injured.
10. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger BeltAlert®) to buckle their
seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or
heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are se-
cured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert® can be activated or deactivated by your au-
thorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert®.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
•In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
•Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
•A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Information Provided by:
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6.
To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Information Provided by:
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
•ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Information Provided by:
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
•ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a ratcheting sound as the seat belt retracts.
Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and
then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating posi-
tions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Information Provided by:
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
•Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•Knee Impact Bolsters
•Advanced Front Air Bags
•Supplemental Side Air Bags
•Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
•Seat Belt Pretenioners
•Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•Seat Track Position Sensors
•Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passen-
ger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instru-
ment panel, above the glove compartment. The words
SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-
pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•Air Bag Warning Light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Information Provided by:
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
erly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
•The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
•The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power de-
ployment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power de-
ployment OR Full-
power deployment
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de-
ployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-
senger seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
•Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Information Provided by:
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
•Sitting upright
•Facing forward
•Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
•Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel).
•The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
•The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
•The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Information Provided by:
•Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
•Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
•Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
•Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
•Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler
Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Information Provided by:
•Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC .
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
•Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG label sewn into
the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Information Provided by:
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SABs; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG. SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction poten-
tial provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
•Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
•Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Information Provided by:
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
•Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Information Provided by:
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
•As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
•Cut off fuel to the engine.
•Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
•Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
•Unlock the doors automatically.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Information Provided by:
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
•The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant
Warning Light will illuminate on the instru-
ment panel.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Information Provided by:
The Redundant Warning Light will stay on until the fault
is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert
you that the Redundant Warning Light has come on and
a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Warning
Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driv-
ing have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-
diately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Information Provided by:
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resi-
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
•www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Information Provided by:
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Information Provided by:
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Information Provided by:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Information Provided by:
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Information Provided by:
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the com-
bined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
Yes You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 17.7 inches (450 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Information Provided by:
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
Tether Strap Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Information Provided by:
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-
ments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
2.
Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Information Provided by:
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
•Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
•ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Information Provided by:
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes All head restraints may be re-
moved.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
seat belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2.
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Information Provided by:
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Information Provided by:
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Information Provided by:
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵MIRRORS ............................122
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .122
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .123
▫Outside Mirrors ......................129
▫Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........130
▫Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped .................130
▫Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped ...............130
▫Power Mirrors .......................131
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........132
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .132
䡵BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................133
▫Rear Cross Path.......................139
▫Modes Of Operation ...................140
▫General Information....................141
䡵SEATS ..............................142
▫Power Seats — If Equipped ..............142
▫Manual Seats — If Equipped .............145
3
Information Provided by:
▫Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........147
▫Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......149
▫Head Restraints ......................149
▫Folding Rear Seat .....................152
䡵DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .153
▫Programming The Memory Feature .........154
▫Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory .................155
▫Memory Position Recall .................156
▫Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................156
䡵TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........157
䡵LIGHTS .............................159
▫Headlight Switch .....................159
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......160
▫Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............161
▫Headlight Time Delay ..................161
▫Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped ...........................162
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....163
▫Lights-On Reminder ...................163
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............164
▫Multifunction Lever ...................165
▫Turn Signals .........................165
▫Lane Change Assist ...................166
▫High/Low Beam Switch ................166
▫Flash-To-Pass ........................166
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Front Map/Reading Lights ..............166
▫Interior Lights .......................168
▫Battery Saver Feature ..................170
䡵WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......170
▫Windshield Wiper Operation .............171
▫Intermittent Wiper System ...............172
▫Windshield Washer Operation.............173
▫Mist ...............................174
▫Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........175
䡵TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .176
䡵HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................177
䡵ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................178
▫To Activate ..........................179
▫To Set A Desired Speed .................180
▫To Deactivate ........................180
▫To Resume Speed .....................180
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............180
▫To Accelerate For Passing ................182
䡵ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................182
▫Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .185
▫Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .186
▫To Activate/Deactivate..................187
▫To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............188
▫To Cancel ...........................188
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Information Provided by:
▫ToTurnOff..........................189
▫To Resume ..........................189
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............190
▫Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......192
▫Overtake Aid ........................196
▫ACC Operation At Stop .................197
▫Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......197
▫Display Warnings And Maintenance ........199
▫Precautions While Driving With ACC .......202
▫General Information....................206
▫Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode ..............................206
䡵FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ............209
▫Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation ...................209
▫Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............211
▫Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .213
▫FCW Limited Warning ..................213
▫Service FCW Warning ..................214
䡵LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............214
▫LaneSense Operation ...................214
▫Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............215
▫LaneSense Warning Message..............216
▫Changing LaneSense Status ..............220
䡵PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................221
▫ParkSense® Sensors ....................222
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫ParkSense® Warning Display .............222
▫ParkSense® Display ....................222
▫Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........228
▫Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................229
▫Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........229
▫ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......230
䡵PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .................232
▫ParkSense® Sensors ....................234
▫ParkSense® Warning Display .............234
▫ParkSense® Display ....................235
▫Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........245
▫Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .246
▫Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........247
▫ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......247
䡵PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .........................250
▫Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System.....................251
▫Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................253
▫Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................262
䡵PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................274
䡵OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................277
▫Front Map/Reading Lights ..............278
▫Sunglass Bin Door ....................279
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Information Provided by:
䡵GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .281
▫
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .282
▫Programming A Rolling Code .............283
▫Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........285
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......286
▫Using HomeLink® ....................288
▫Security ............................288
▫Troubleshooting Tips ...................288
▫General Information....................289
䡵POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........290
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ..............291
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........291
▫Closing Sunroof — Express...............292
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........292
▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................292
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ..............292
▫Sunshade Operation....................293
▫Wind Buffeting .......................293
▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................293
▫Ignition Off Operation ..................293
䡵POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED .........................294
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ..............295
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........296
▫Closing Sunroof — Express...............296
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........296
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ..............296
▫Opening Power Shade — Express ..........297
▫Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode .....297
▫Closing Power Shade — Express ...........297
▫Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode ......297
▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................298
▫Wind Buffeting .......................298
▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................298
▫Ignition Off Operation ..................298
䡵ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................299
䡵POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........302
䡵CUPHOLDERS ........................303
▫Front Seat Cupholders ..................303
▫Rear Seat Cupholders ..................304
䡵STORAGE ............................305
▫Glove Compartment ...................305
▫Console Features .....................306
▫Door Storage.........................309
▫Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .310
䡵CARGO AREA FEATURES ................310
▫Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat —
If Equipped..........................310
▫Grocery Bag Hooks ....................313
▫Ski Pass-Through......................313
䡵REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............314
▫Rear Window Defroster .................314
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Information Provided by:
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
•Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
•Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
•Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
•Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
•Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
•The vehicle brand.
•The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you
or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
•The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
•An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
•Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but
are not limited to, the following factors:
•The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
•The ignition key is in OFF position.
•The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
•The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
•The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
•Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
•Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
•Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
•Wireless network congestion.
•Weather.
•Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Information Provided by:
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
•Full forward position
•Full rearward position
•Normal position
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
to the Front and Rear Doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door
trim panel. The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirror Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Information Provided by:
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Information Provided by:
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
•The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
BSM Warning Light
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Information Provided by:
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Approaching Overtaking/Passing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Information Provided by:
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
•Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
•If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Information Provided by:
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power drivers seat may be
equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch
is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or down-
ward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
Power Lumbar Switch Front Seat Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
•Press the heated seat button
once to turn the High
setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the Low setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
Seat Height Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Information Provided by:
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the
air from the passenger compartment and blow air
through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and
LOW.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
•Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose
HIGH.
•Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LOW.
•Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position
following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their
normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center seat
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Information Provided by:
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either
or both seatbacks.
Push Button
Rear Seat Release Loops
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
WARNING!
•Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down posi-
tion) should not be used as a play area by children.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
appropriate number button on the switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Information Provided by:
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (1) button within five
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will
display which memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (2) button within five
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory
position is being set.
Driver Memory Switch
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
•To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds press and release the
button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a
recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
•When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two levers must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Information Provided by:
3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and
push and hold the safety latch lever to the right. 4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
Safety Latch Lever Location Safety Latch Lever
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-
matic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights — if equipped.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Information Provided by:
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
•The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
•The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Information Provided by:
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
•Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Information Provided by:
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved,
it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
•
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/DID
and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
•When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Information Provided by:
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Press the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, press the button a second time.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Press Lenses
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-
dently by pressing the lenses.
Press the lens once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, press the lens a second time.
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the RKE is pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons Front Map/Reading Lights Press Lenses
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Information Provided by:
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will
remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Information Provided by:
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotat-
ing a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
NOTE: If snow packing occurs that obstructs the normal
operation of the windshield wipers the following mes-
sage will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID):
⬙Front Wipers Blocked Cycle Switch or Clean the Wind-
shield⬙. It is important to remove the snow accumulation
to allow the wipers to function normally and to maintain
good visibility of the road.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Information Provided by:
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-
viously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
Windshield Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
•The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
•The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
•The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
•Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Information Provided by:
•Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Information Provided by:
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET +button.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET -button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Information Provided by:
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
•If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
•The ACC system:
•Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
•Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
•Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
•When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
•When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
•Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
•Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
•When you apply the brakes.
•When the parking brake is set.
•When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
•When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
•When the brakes are overheated.
•When the driver door is open.
•When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET +button or the SET -button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC/DID.
•The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
•The brake pedal is applied.
•The CANCEL button is pressed.
•An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
•The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
•The vehicle parking brake is applied.
•Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
•Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
•The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pressed.
•The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
•The ignition is turned OFF.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
•If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to press the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
•ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing the SET +button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing the SET -button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
•When you override and push the SET +button or SET
-buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
•When you use the SET -button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Information Provided by:
•The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to press the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
•The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Information Provided by:
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Set-
ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
•The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•The distance setting is changed.
•The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn-
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera-
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
Brake Alert
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-
tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
on ACC system status.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Information Provided by:
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•Distance Setting Change
•System Cancel
•Driver Override
•System Off
•ACC Proximity Warning
•ACC Unavailable Warning
•The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Information Provided by:
•Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
•If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
•Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
•If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
•Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID
will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full function-
ality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see
your authorized dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Information Provided by:
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Offset Driving Condition Example
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example ACC Hill Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Information Provided by:
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Information Provided by:
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, press the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +
button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Information Provided by:
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pressing the SET -button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
•The brake pedal is applied.
•The CANCEL button is pressed.
•The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•The vehicle parking brake is applied.
•The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
•The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
•The ignition is turned off.
•The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pressed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Information Provided by:
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
•The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
•The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
•It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
•The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect® display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Information Provided by:
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns
off).
•Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
•Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
•Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Button
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
•The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
•FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
•FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Lim-
ited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Information Provided by:
Once the condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
•ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
•Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the EVIC/DID to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect® display. To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the Driver Information Display (DID).
LaneSense Warning Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Information Provided by:
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Lane Sense On Message
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
•When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
•When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
•When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
•When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
•When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
•For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect® system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
alization settings.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
•Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
•The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.)
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Information Provided by:
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Information Provided by:
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Information Provided by:
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
59-47 in
(150-120
cm)
47-39 in
(120-100
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING ALERTS
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Information Provided by:
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect® display.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or 7⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-
quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved
to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the EVIC/DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Information Provided by:
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
ating properly.
•Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
•When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clus-
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC/
DID will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
•Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-
sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
ver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
•The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off
via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
•Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
•Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid-
ing with a detected obstacle.
•The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
•The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect® System.
•ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through igni-
tion cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
•The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
•The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
•The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi-
tations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Information Provided by:
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above
the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in
the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.
The system will become active again if the vehicle speed
is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense®
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System⬙section for further information.
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
7⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” for further infor-
mation.
ParkSense® Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Information Provided by:
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Information Provided by:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in (200
cm)
79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
59-47 in
(150-120
cm)
47-39 in
(120-100
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Information Provided by:
WARNING ALERTS
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense® Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Information Provided by:
No Tone/Solid Arc No Tone/Flashing Arc
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Information Provided by:
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect® display.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
ParkSense® Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Information Provided by:
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or 7⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-
quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙,⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙message for five seconds.
When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙,⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙pop up message for five seconds.
After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with
⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙at either the front or rear sensor loca-
tion depending on where the fault is detected. The
system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that
is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙messages if an object is detected within the five
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or ⬙
Driver Information Display (DID)” for further informa-
tion.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
system operating properly.
•Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
•When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Information Provided by:
•When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
•There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
CAUTION!
•ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Information Provided by:
PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
NOTE:
•The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
•The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
•During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-
tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
•The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
•New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles accumulated before the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The system will also continuously perform the dy-
namic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be en-
abled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect® display.
To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again
(LED turns off).
ParkSense® Active Park Assist Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Information Provided by:
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
•The parking maneuver is completed.
•Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
•Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
•Touching the steering wheel during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
•Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
•The Driver’s door is opened.
•The trunk is opened.
•Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
•The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the follow-
ing conditions are present:
•The gear position is in DRIVE.
•The ignition is in the RUN position.
•The ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated.
•The Driver’s door is closed.
•The trunk is closed.
•Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pressing the
ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.
•The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the Driver
Information Display (DID). You may switch to perpen-
dicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the
left side steering wheel switch to change your parking
space setting.
NOTE:
•When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati-
cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Information Provided by:
•The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
•The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
•The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Active ParkSense Searching
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Information Provided by:
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
•When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
•The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
•The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
•If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Information Provided by:
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Information Provided by:
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-
VERSE position.
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Information Provided by:
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
Check Surroundings — Move Backward Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral-
lel parking if you desire.
Once the driver presses OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display.
NOTE:
•When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati-
cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
•The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
•The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
Active ParkSense Searching Display
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Information Provided by:
•When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
•The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Information Provided by:
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
•It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
•The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
•The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
•If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Information Provided by:
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Forward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Information Provided by:
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-
VERSE position.
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system in order to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active
Park Assist system.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other ve-
hicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Information Provided by:
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
ParkView® Camera Location
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
VERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out
of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button
personalization entry in the camera settings menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Power sunroof and power
sunshade switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof/Sunshade
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Information Provided by:
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Press the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, press the button a second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Press Lenses
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-
dently by pressing the lenses.
Press the lens once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, press the lens a second time.
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the RKE is pressed.
Sunglass Bin Door
The overhead console has a compartment which provides
storage for a pair of sunglasses.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear mounted or
front mounted sunglass bin door.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” de-
sign. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
open. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
close.
Front Map/Reading Lights Press Lenses
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Information Provided by:
Sunglass Bin Door — Rear Mounted Sunglass Bin Door — Front Mounted
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the sun visor
designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
•Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required
by federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Information Provided by:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Information Provided by:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Information Provided by:
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
•Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Information Provided by:
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Information Provided by:
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switches are located to the right be-
tween the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
Power Shade Switches
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the sunroof switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to
the full open position and automatically stop. (If the
sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is
initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening). This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
Information Provided by:
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will (if the sunshade is in the closed position
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will auto-
matically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening) open to the full open position and
automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Opening Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
Information Provided by:
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE: All accessories connected to the “battery” pow-
ered outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
Information Provided by:
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
•Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
Front Center Console Outlet
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
Information Provided by:
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
forward wall of storage bin (below media center) of
center console. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device.
The outlet automatically turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
Power Inverter Outlet
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
of the armrest between the front seats.
Front Seat Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
Information Provided by:
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el-
bows.
Rear Seat Cupholders
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with
a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the
emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key
into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn
the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the
reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
Information Provided by:
Console Features
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest.
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
The armrest can be slid forward/rearward to allow
driver/passenger comfort position.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
There is a front center console storage area located under
the center console cupholder.
•To access the front center console storage area press the
release button and pull rearward.
NOTE: The center console cupholder can be placed in
any position to maintain access to the storage area.
Center Console Armrest Storage
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Located inside the center console storage compartment is
a line that indicates how much storage is allowed.
Center Console Cupholder Release Front Center Console Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Filling the console storage area above this line
may impede the sliding of the cupholder.
Located inside the front of the console storage area power
cords can be routed from the storage area to the center
console pass-through.
Storage Compartment Fill Line Center Console Storage Passage
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas with a bottle
holder.
Front Center Console Pass-Through
Front Door Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
Information Provided by:
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
Equipped
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-
ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
Rear Armrest Storage
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear Seatback
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
•To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
•Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
•Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 35 lbs
(16 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
Grocery Bag Hooks
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
Information Provided by:
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 5 minutes of operation, press
the button a second time.
Ski Pass-Through
314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 315
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........320
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........321
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ......322
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....323
䡵ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................333
▫Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
3.5” Display .........................335
▫Oil Change Reset .....................345
▫Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
(DID) .............................346
▫EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............349
▫Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........354
䡵DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....356
▫Driver Information Display (DID) - 7⬙
Display ............................358
▫Oil Change Reset .....................370
▫Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
(DID) .............................371
▫EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............373
䡵Uconnect® SETTINGS....................377
4
Information Provided by:
▫Buttons On The Faceplate................379
▫Buttons On The Touchscreen..............379
▫Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN
Settings.............................379
䡵Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........397
䡵
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .397
䡵STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................398
▫Radio Operation ......................399
▫Media Mode .........................399
䡵RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .399
▫General Information ...................400
䡵CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................400
▫Manual Climate Controls ................400
▫Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped .........................405
▫Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped..........................411
▫Climate Control Functions ...............417
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......419
▫Operating Tips .......................420
䡵Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................423
▫Introducing Uconnect® .................423
▫Get Started ..........................424
▫Basic Voice Commands..................426
▫Radio ..............................427
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
▫Media..............................429
▫Phone..............................430
▫Voice Text Reply ......................432
▫Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................432
▫Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................434
▫Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) ..........435
▫Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................436
▫Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............437
▫Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............438
▫Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)....................438
▫SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) .......440
▫Additional Information .................441
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio Screen 11 — Steering Wheel
2 — EVIC/DID Controls 7 — Passenger Air Bag 12 — Hood Release
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Compartment 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Cruise/Adaptive Cruise Control 9 — Radio Controls
5 — Ignition Switch 10 — Manual Climate Controls
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Red EVIC/DID Telltales
2. Amber EVIC/DID Telltales
3. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required .
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied it does not show the degree of brake application.
4. LaneSense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
5. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
This displays the set speed of the Electronic
Speed Control.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
6. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Dis-
play
This will display the distance setting for the
ACC system. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn
signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
A tone will chime, and an EVIC/DID message
will appear if either turn signal is left on for
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for
a defective outside light bulb.
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Information Provided by:
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
•Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
10. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
12. Tire Pressure Monitoring
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Information Provided by:
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
13. Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
14. Fuel Filler Door Location
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
15. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
16. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL/S)
•P = Park
•R = Reverse
•N = Neutral
•D = Drive
•L = Low – If Equipped
•S = Sport – If Equipped
The shift status “P,R,N,D,L/,S” are displayed indicating
the shifter position. Refer to “Starting And Operating”.
17. Engine Temperature
When the engine temperature gets too high, the
temperature icon will change color from light blue
to red.
18. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Information Provided by:
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
21. Stop/Start Autostop Active
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted
in the EVIC/DID. Press and release the
SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to display the
Stop/Start status. This telltale will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function can go into “Autostop” mode.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
22. Vehicle Security Alarm
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
23. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
24. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
25. EVIC White Telltales — If Equipped
26. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
27. Electronic Vehicle Information Display (EVIC) and
Driver Information Display (DID) Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Instrument Cluster Messages for EVIC/DID.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
information.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
display is located in the instrument cluster.
The EVIC Main Menu items consists of the following:
•Speedometer
•Vehicle Info
•Fuel Economy Info
•Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
•Stop/Start — If Equipped
•Audio Info
•Messages
•Screen Setup
•Settings
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Information Provided by:
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items ( Speed-
ometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy, Trip A,
Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Messages, Screen Set
Up, Settings).
•DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu
items (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel
Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio,
Messages, Screen Set Up, Settings).
•RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
EVIC Controls
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
•OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
3.5” Display
The 3.5” EVIC displays are located in the center portion
of the cluster.
1. Electronic Park Brake Failure — If Equipped
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Information Provided by:
2. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Information Provided by:
4. Main Display Area
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
“i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside
temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right
Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pres-
sure”.
•Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle).
•Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
•Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
5. LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque warnings
when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
•When the LaneSense Warning system is ON and
ready the lane lines and LaneSense Warning indica-
tor are the color gray.
•When the LaneSense Warning system is armed, the
lane lines change to white and the LaneSense Warn-
ing indicator changes to green.
•When the LaneSense Warning system senses a lane
cross situation, the approaching lane line and the
LaneSense Warning indicator change from white to
yellow.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Operation”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
6. Fuel Gauge
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
7. Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
8. Reconfigurable Yellow Telltale Display
•Forward Collision Warning Indicator
This telltale will turn on warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
•Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
windshield washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Information Provided by:
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further
information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•LaneSense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
LaneSense Departure has detected a
failure.
•Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
filler cap is loose.
•Stop/Start Service Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
Stop/Start system is not functioning prop-
erly and service is required.
•Service AWD Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
9. Reconfigurable White Telltale Area
•Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) has reached the speed desired and
the set button has been selected. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) has been turned on and in the READY
state. For further information, refer to “Electronic
Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
10. Reconfigurable Red Telltale Display
•Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil tempera-
ture is high. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible.
•Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
Equipped
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” mes-
sage and a steering wheel icon are dis-
played on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
power steering assistance. Refer to “Power Steering”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
speeds and during parking maneuvers.
•If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
•Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a prob-
lem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IM-
MEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure.
The light should turn on momentarily when
the engine is started. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes
when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-
rected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
•Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-
tem. The light will come on when the
ignition is first turned ON and remain on
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or en-
gine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
•Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN po-
sition. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one
or more doors may be ajar.
•Decklid Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the deck-
lid may be ajar.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Information Provided by:
•Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive
transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer
towing. It may also occur when operating
the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition.
If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in
NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
11. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Information Provided by:
release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
(DID)
•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Service Airbag System
•Traction Control Off
•Washer Fluid Low
•Oil Pressure Low
•Oil Change Due
•Fuel Low
•Service Antilock Brake System
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Service Power Steering
•Cruise Off
•Cruise Ready
•Cruise Set To XXX MPH
•Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
•Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
•Service Tire Pressure System
•Parking Brake Engaged
•Brake Fluid Low
•Service Electronic Braking System
•Engine Temperature Hot
•Battery Voltage Low
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Lights On
•Right Turn Signal Light Out
•Left Turn Signal Light Out
•Turn Signal On
•Vehicle Not in Park
•Key in Ignition
•Key in Ignition Lights On
•Remote Start Active Key to Run
•Remote Start Active Push Start Button
•Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
•Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
•Remote Start Aborted Door Open
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Information Provided by:
•Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
•Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
•Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
•Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
•Service Airbag System
•Service Airbag Warning Light
•Door Open
•Doors Open
•Gear Not Available
•Shift Not Allowed
•Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
•Autostick Unavailable Service Required
•Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
•Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
•Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
•Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
•Service Transmission
•Service Shifter
•Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
•Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
•Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle
between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to
select your speedometer display.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant
Temp will be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow
button to scroll through the information sub-menus and
Push the OK button to select or reset the following
resettable sub-menus:
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the
following will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Information Provided by:
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Oil Temp
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
•Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
L/100 km with Bargraph)
•Range To Empty (RTE)
•Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
•Distance
•Average Fuel Economy
•Elapsed Time
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start message is displayed in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the OK button to display the Stop/Start
status.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Settings (EVIC)
Settings Translation Message Submenu
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French
2 Units Select Units U.S., Metric
3 FCW Sensitivity FCW Sensitivity Off, Near, Far
4 ParkSense ParkSense Off, Sound Only, Sound & Display
5 Blind Spot Alert Blind Spot Alert Off, Lights Only, Lights & Chime
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Asst On, Off
7 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On, Off
8 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On, Off
9 Passive Entry Passive Entry On, Off
10 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door, All Doors
11 Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On, Off
12 Remote Start Comfort
System
Rmt Start Comfort On, Off
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Settings Translation Message Submenu
13 Sound Horn with Remote
Start
Horn w/ Rmt Start On, Off
14 Sound Horn with Remote
Lock
Horn w/ Rmt Lock On, Off
15 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On, Off
16 Daytime Running Lights Daytime Lights On, Off
17 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On, Off
18 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On, Off
19 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On, Off
20 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90
seconds
21 Key-Off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off, 45 seconds, 5 minutes, 10
minutes
22 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90
seconds
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Information Provided by:
Settings Translation Message Submenu
23 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On, Off
24 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On, Off
25 Compass variance Compass Var See Owner’s Manual, X Increment
26 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Press > to calibrate the compass
27 Brake Service Brake Service Follow the VF specifically for this
one
28 Auto Park Brake Auto Park Brake On, Off
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
1. Upper Left
•None
•Compass (default)
•Outside Temp
•Time
•Range To Empty (RTE)
•Average MPG
•Current MPG
2. Upper Right
•None
•Compass
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Outside Temp (default)
•Time
•Range To Empty (RTE)
•Average MPG
•Current MPG
NOTE: defaults will change to Average MPG UR, Range
UL if the proxies for Compass and Outside Temp are not
available
3. Center
•None
•Compass
•Outside Temp
•Time
•Range To Empty
•Average MPG
•Current MPG
•Trip A
•Trip B
•Audio Information
•Menu Title (Default Setting)
•Digital Speedo
4. Current Gear
•On
•Off (Default)
5. Defaults (defaults: Compass UR, Outside Temp UL,
Center Menu Title, Gear Display Off)
•Restore
•Cancel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Information Provided by:
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
The DID Main Menu items consists of the following:
•Speedometer
•Vehicle Info
•Driver Assist
•Fuel Economy Info
•Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
•Stop/Start — If Equipped
•Audio Info
•Messages
•Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID)
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver As-
sist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Stop/Start Info,
Audio, Messages, Screen Setup).
•DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Stop/Start
Info, Audio, Messages, Screen Setup).
•RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
DID Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Information Provided by:
•BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
•OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Driver Information Display (DID) - 7ⴖDisplay
The 7” DID displays are located in the center portion of
the cluster.
Driver Information Display (DID) Display
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
1. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display
•Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
Equipped
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” mes-
sage and a steering wheel icon are dis-
played on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
power steering assistance. Refer to “Power Steering”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
•Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
speeds and during parking maneuvers.
•If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
•Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one
or more doors may be ajar.
•Decklid Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the deck-
lid may be ajar.
•Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure.
The light should turn on momentarily when
the engine is started. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes
when this light turns on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Information Provided by:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-
rected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
•Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a prob-
lem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IM-
MEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-
tem. The light will come on when the
ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or en-
gine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
•Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil tempera-
ture is high. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible.
•Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN po-
sition. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive
transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer
towing. It may also occur when operating
the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition.
If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in
NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
2. Reconfigurable Info Area
•Compass
•Outside Temp
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG
•Current MPG
3. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display
•Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
windshield washer fluid is low.
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further
information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•LaneSense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Lane Sense Departure has detected a
failure.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
filler cap is loose.
•Stop/Start Service Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
Stop/Start system is not functioning prop-
erly and service is required.
•Service AWD Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
•Forward Collision Warning Indicator
This telltale will turn on warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
4. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Information Provided by:
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
5. Driver Information Display (DID)
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
“i” will be displayed in the middle of the DID’s top
line. Examples of this message type are “Right Front
Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
•Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle).
•Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Information Provided by:
•Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
6. Electronic Park Brake Failure
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.
7. LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque warnings
when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
•When the LaneSense Warning system is ON and
ready the lane lines and LaneSense Warning indica-
tor are the color gray.
•When the LaneSense Warning system is armed, the
lane lines change to white and the LaneSense Warn-
ing indicator changes to green.
•When the LaneSense Warning system senses a lane
cross situation, the approaching lane line and the
LaneSense Warning indicator change from white to
yellow.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Operation”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
8. Reconfigurable Info Area
•Compass
•Outside Temp
•Time
•Range
•Average MPG
•Current MPG
9. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
This displays the set speed of the Electronic
Speed Control.
10. Dedicated Cruise Control Telltales
•Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
Display
This will display the distance setting for the
ACC system. For further information, refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
11. Sub Menu Text
•Individual Tire Pressure Monitor
•Coolant Temp
•Transmission Temperature
•Oil Temperature
•Oil Life
•Battery Voltage
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Information Provided by:
12. Low Fuel Display
This area will display text to the visual warn-
ings (i.e., “Push Brake To Start”).
Odometer Display/Fuel Gauge/Temperature Gauge/
Submenu Area
•The odometer display shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It
is a good idea for you to make a record of the
odometer reading before the repair/service, so that
you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the
door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be
reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the DID messages and Submenus.
•Fuel Gauge
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
13. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL/S)
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,/S” are displayed indi-
cating the shifter lever position. Refer to “Starting And
Operating”.
•P = Park
•R = Reverse
•N = Neutral
•D = Drive
•L = Low – If Equipped
•S = Sport – If Equipped
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Information Provided by:
14. Engine Temperature Display
When the engine temperature gets too high, the
temperature icon will change color from light blue
to red.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
(DID)
•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Service Airbag System
•Traction Control Off
•Washer Fluid Low
•Oil Pressure Low
•Oil Change Due
•Fuel Low
•Service Antilock Brake System
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Service Power Steering
•Cruise Off
•Cruise Ready
•Cruise Set To XXX MPH
•Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
•Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
•Service Tire Pressure System
•Parking Brake Engaged
•Brake Fluid Low
•Service Electronic Braking System
•Engine Temperature Hot
•Battery Voltage Low
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Information Provided by:
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Lights On
•Right Turn Signal Light Out
•Left Turn Signal Light Out
•Turn Signal On
•Vehicle Not in Park
•Key in Ignition
•Key in Ignition Lights On
•Remote Start Active Key to Run
•Remote Start Active Push Start Button
•Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
•Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
•Remote Start Aborted Door Open
•Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
•Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
•Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
•Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
•Service Airbag System
•Service Airbag Warning Light
•Door Open
•Doors Open
•Gear Not Available
•Shift Not Allowed
•Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
•Autostick Unavailable Service Required
•Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
•Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
•Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
•Service Transmission
•Service Shifter
•Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
•Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
•Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle
between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to
select your speedometer display.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant
Temp will be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Information Provided by:
button to scroll through the information sub-menus and
Push the OK button to select or reset the following
resettable sub-menus:
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the
following will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Oil Temp
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•Distance Setting Change
•System Cancel
•Driver Override
•System Off
•ACC Proximity Warning
•ACC Unavailable Warning
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Information Provided by:
•The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
LaneSense Menu
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
•Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
L/100 km with Bargraph)
•Range To Empty (RTE)
•Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
•Distance
•Average Fuel Economy
•Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start message is displayed in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the OK button to display the Stop/Start
status.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
Uconnect® 8.4 Buttons On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons are located below the Uconnect® system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect®
screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn
the screen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN Settings
Uconnect® 5.0 — If a SETTINGS button on the faceplate
exists, push this button. If not, push the MORE button on
the faceplate and press the ⬙Settings⬙button on the
touchscreen. The remaining settings are defined for the
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — Press the “Apps” button on
the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access pro-
grammable features that may be equipped such as Dis-
play, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance (if
equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Information Provided by:
equipped), Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Per-
sonal Data (if equipped).
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
•Display Mode
This feature allows you to select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status, press and release the
Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen. Then press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or push the
back button on the faceplate.
•Display Brightness With Headlights On
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen. Then
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Display Brightness With the Headlights Off
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen. Then
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
•Set Language
This feature allows you to select one of the languages for
all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
•Units
This feature allows you to select US or Metric units of
measure in the EVIC/DID, odometer, and navigation
system (if equipped). Press “US” or “Metric” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
•Touchscreen Beep
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press the
“Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Information Provided by:
•Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the driver screen/EVIC/DID/Cluster dis-
play as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within
a programmed route. To turn on or enable, press the
“Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
•Voice
This feature allows you to change the Voice Response
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
press the “Brief” (Brief is a shortened response for
advanced users) or “Detailed” (Detailed provides more
comprehensive responses for new users) button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
•Sync Time With GPS
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
•Set Time Hours
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the ”X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
•Set Time Minutes
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
•Time Format
This feature allows you to select the time format display
setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touch-
screen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or
24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
•Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
•Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Sensitivity — If
Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Information Provided by:
the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
and release the “Near” or “Far” button. Then press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push the back
button on the faceplate.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
•Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h) and is only enabled when FCW
is on.
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LaneSense Warning can be set to
provide either an “early”, “medium” or “late” warning
zone start point.
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•ParkSense® — If Equipped
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound and Display.”
Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating
information.
•Front ParkSense® Volume — If Equipped
Front ParkSense® volume settings can be selected from
the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
•Rear ParkSense® Volume — If Equipped
Rear ParkSense® volume settings can be selected from
the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Information Provided by:
•Rear ParkSense® Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense® system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en-
abled when ParkSense® is also on).
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Braking Assist” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system func-
tion and operating information.
•Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir-
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE-
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To enable or turn on, press the “Tilt Mirrors In
Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
•Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights Only or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights
category. When this category is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime
category is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the
“Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen, or push the back button on the faceplate.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
•ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
•ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView®
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
•Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield and the wipers are set to an intermit-
tent position. To make your selection, press the “Rain
Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
•Electric Park Brake Service Mode — If Equipped
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to
command the electric park brake retraction, to service the
rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Information Provided by:
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
•Auto Park Brake
Auto Park Brake will set the park brake once the vehicle
is set in park (or at key off for a manual transmission)
•Hill Start Assist
This setting will hold the brake if the driver is on a hill
and takes their foot off the brake to accelerate.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
•Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
back button on the faceplate.
•Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
•Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu, or push the back
button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
•Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without
the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Information Provided by:
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
•Auto Door Locks
The Auto Door Lock feature can be enabled, or disabled,
by your authorized dealer. Please visit your local autho-
rized Chrysler dealer for further information.
•Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
•Sound Horn With Remote
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated via the key fob. To make your
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
•Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the
“Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Select one of three options to
sound the horn, Off, 1st Press, or 2nd Press. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
•1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door
is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Information Provided by:
•Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked To FOB” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, one of the following settings will be avail-
able:
•Auto-On Driver Heated Seat OR Auto-On Driver
Heated Seat & Steering wheel OR Auto-On Driver
Heated/Vented Seat OR Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented
Seat & Steering Wheel
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated/vented
seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tem-
peratures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat
will turn on. To make your selection, press “Off,” “Remote
Start Only,” OR “All Starts” checkbox until a check-mark
appears next to the setting option. Select “Off,” “Remote
Start Only” OR “All Starts” to determine when the feature
is activated. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seats” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
•Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, press the “0 seconds,”
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
•Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Information Provided by:
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the ’C’ icon, use the arrows to
adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
•Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
•Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
•Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed
by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•AUX Volume Match
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
•Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to, or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selec-
tion, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen,
select the channels you would like to skip followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
•Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Information Provided by:
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to
access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
•Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
•Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Per-
sonal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the
touchscreen. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area of the center console,
this feature allows an iPod®/MP3 player, or an external
USB device, to be connected to the audio system.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Information Provided by:
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various audio modes available (AM/FM/
SXM/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which audio mode you
are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
while in mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the selected media (Disc, AUX, Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Information Provided by:
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-
wise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
Manual Climate Controls
1 — RECIRCULATION Control 5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
2 — Front Blower Control 6 — REAR DEFROST Mode
3 — MAX Air Conditioning
(A/C)
7 — MODE Control
4 — Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Information Provided by:
Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is
recirculated.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-
mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and through the con-
denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Information Provided by:
Recirculation Control
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any out-
side odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
•If the RECIRCULATION
button is pushed when
the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
•Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
•The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C
button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Information Provided by:
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Manual Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when ON.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. If the front defrost mode
is turned off the climate system will return the previous
setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five
additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either buttons on the
faceplate or buttons on the touchscreens as follows:
Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
7. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
•Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side
to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located adjacent to the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
•Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
•Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
•Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
when necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Information Provided by:
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch-
screen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch-
screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
Buttons on your touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On
Your Faceplate
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On Your Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Information Provided by:
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On Your Touchscreen
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
5. Front Defrost Button
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Information Provided by:
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
(Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the knob on your
faceplate or the buttons on your touchscreen as follows:
Knob On Your Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the knob clock-
wise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On Your Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
•Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
Information Provided by:
•Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
•Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
•Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-
ture settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
14.
Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
•If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
•If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
Information Provided by:
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings.
The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX
A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate the button on your
touchscreen and the button on your faceplate when either
button is selected. Push either button on your touch-
screen or button on your faceplate a second time to turn
off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (recirculation button on
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On
systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in
the control button to blink and then turn off.
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on your faceplate or the button
on your touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Information Provided by:
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Information Provided by:
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
Key Features:
•5” touchscreen
•Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect® 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
Information Provided by:
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect® 8.4AN
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Information Provided by:
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
•Cancel to stop a current voice session
•Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
•Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect® 5.0
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Sub-
scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
•Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
•Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
•Change source to Bluetooth®
•Change source to iPod®
•Change source to USB
•Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
Information Provided by:
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
•Call John Smith
•Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
•Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
•Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the
name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When
a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Information Provided by:
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply”
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me. I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
•Set temperature to 70 degrees
•Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
•Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Information Provided by:
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
•For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
•For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
.
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped ve-
hicles purchased within the continental United States and
Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
Information Provided by:
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Regis-
tration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
factory-installed Remote Start.)
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
MoparOwnerConnect.com
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Information Provided by:
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
to process your message.
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
voice to send a personalized text message.
TIP:
•Not compatible with iPhone®.
•Messages are limited to 140 characters.
•The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp®
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
Information Provided by:
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
•Show fuel prices
•Show 5 - day weather forecast
•Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
SiriusXM Travel Link™
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Additional Information
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC.
Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks
are registered trademarks of Yelp.
DriveUconnect.com
DriveUconnect.ca
Uconnect® System Support:
•U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400
•Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵STARTING PROCEDURES ................448
▫Normal Starting.......................448
▫Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) .............................449
▫Extended Park Starting..................449
▫If Engine Fails To Start .................450
▫After Starting ........................451
䡵STOP/START SYSTEM — 2.4L ENGINE.......451
▫Automatic Mode .....................451
▫Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
AUTOSTOP .........................452
▫
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .453
▫
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .455
▫
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .455
▫System Malfunction ...................455
䡵ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .456
䡵AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............457
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock...............459
5
Information Provided by:
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .459
▫Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........460
▫Gear Ranges .........................461
䡵PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .....468
▫Operation ..........................468
䡵ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .470
䡵DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........471
▫Acceleration .........................471
▫Traction ............................471
䡵DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............472
▫Flowing/Rising Water ..................472
▫Shallow Standing Water .................472
䡵POWER STEERING .....................474
䡵ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) .........475
▫Auto Park Brake ......................479
▫Safehold ............................480
▫Brake Service Mode ...................480
䡵BRAKE SYSTEM .......................481
䡵ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .482
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............482
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ............485
▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........485
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............486
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........487
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................490
▫Ready Alert Braking ...................491
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
▫Rain Brake Support ....................491
▫ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................491
䡵TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............493
▫Tire Markings ........................493
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........496
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........498
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........499
䡵TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........504
▫Tire Pressure ........................504
▫Tire Inflation Pressures .................506
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .507
▫Radial Ply Tires ......................507
▫Tire Types ...........................508
▫Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............510
▫Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............510
▫Tire Spinning ........................513
▫Tread Wear Indicators ..................513
▫Life Of Tire .........................514
▫Replacement Tires .....................515
䡵TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......516
䡵TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....518
䡵TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .519
▫Base System .........................523
▫Premium System — If Equipped ...........526
▫General Information ...................530
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Information Provided by:
䡵FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................531
▫Reformulated Gasoline .................531
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............532
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......532
▫MMT In Gasoline .....................533
▫Materials Added To Fuel ................533
▫Fuel System Cautions...................534
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............535
䡵FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED ...........535
▫E-85 General Information ...............535
▫Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................537
▫Fuel Requirements ....................537
▫Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............538
▫Starting ............................538
▫Cruising Range .......................538
▫Replacement Parts ....................539
▫Maintenance ........................539
䡵ADDING FUEL ........................539
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............542
䡵VEHICLE LOADING ....................542
▫Certification Label ....................542
䡵TRAILER TOWING .....................544
䡵RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................545
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .545
▫Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models ............................545
▫Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models .............................546
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Information Provided by:
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
•If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙and ⬙Ex-
tended Park Starting⬙procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel, press the accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor and hold it. Then, cycle the ignition
switch to the START position and release it as soon as the
starter engages. The starter motor will disengage auto-
matically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal, cycle the ignition to the LOCK posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STOP/START SYSTEM — 2.4L ENGINE
The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel and
reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine auto-
matically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions
are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the
accelerator pedal on an automatic transmission will start
the engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START
NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Information Provided by:
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other
conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AU-
TOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
•The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/
Start section. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•The shifter must be in DRIVE or NEUTRAL and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. While in Autostop, the
Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow
to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start Screen.
In the following situations the engine will not stop:
•Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•Driver’s door is not closed.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
•Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
•The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
•HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
•Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
•Battery charge is low.
•The transmission is not in DRIVE or NEUTRAL.
•Hood is open.
•HVAC set to MAX A/C.
•Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
•Fuel level.
•Accelerator pedal input.
•Engine temp too high.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the STOP/START system going into a
STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi-
tions of the items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the brake
pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The
transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine
restart. During this transition the brakes will hold the
vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Information Provided by:
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
•The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to
REVERSE.
•To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
•HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•Battery voltage drops too low.
•Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications).
•STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
•The emissions system requires it.
•A STOP/START system error occurs.
•HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
•The driver door is open and brake pedal released.
•The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is
unbuckled.
•The engine hood has been opened.
•A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off,
the engine may require a manual restart and the electric
park brake may require a manual release (depress brake
pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the key is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
STOP/START OFF Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Information Provided by:
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-
play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message ap-
pears in the EVIC/DID, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-
er’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.
•The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
•The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Information Provided by:
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID).
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to
access the L or S position. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙in this sec-
tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Standard Shifter
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans-
mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Premium Shifter with Shift Paddles
The premium transmission gear selector (with manual
shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel) provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the shift
paddles (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙in this section).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
be completed.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Information Provided by:
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
•With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the shift paddles (if equipped, refer to
⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙in this section for further informa-
tion) or the LOW range (if equipped) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nor-
mal operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine
torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter
clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙will illuminate, a warn-
ing message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
sion cools down.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Information Provided by:
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
creased to make full use of available engine power. To
access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and
rotate it fully clockwise.
LOW (L) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-
shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maxi-
mize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the nine
available gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift is
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
•If Paddle Shift is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
automatic operation.
•If Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
when maximum engine speed is reached (except the
transmission will upshift automatically from 1st to 2nd
gear at wide open throttle, if necessary). Otherwise,
the transmission will upshift only when commanded
by the driver.
•In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the cur-
rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
accelerates.
•If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
•The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
•Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
•The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Information Provided by:
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle
Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Information Provided by:
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
•Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Information Provided by:
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
•Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
•If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
•Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
•Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect® settings.
The parking brake switch is located in the center console.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Information Provided by:
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake,
you may notice a small amount of brake pedal move-
ment. The parking brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch if OFF, however, it can only be released
when the ignition switch in the RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is en-
gaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement while the park-
ing brake is engaging.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled,
and an attempt is made to drive away by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the RUN position. Push on the brake
pedal, then push the parking brake switch down momen-
tarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the
back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, The
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
•Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en-
gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric parking brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph, the parking brake will
remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric
Parking Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will
illuminate. This may be accompanied by the BRAKE
warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent service of the
electric parking brake system is required. Do not rely on
the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect® Settings.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK. This bypass can be
reset by cycling the ignition off and back on again, or by
driving the vehicle up to at least 12 mph (20Km/h), or by
going to the personal setting menu and turning the Auto
Park Brake function OFF and then back ON again.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Information Provided by:
Safehold
Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmis-
sion is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.
Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
Electric Park Brake Switch to the release position while
the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safe-
hold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric parking brake system, this
can only be done after retracting the Electric Parking
Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center), Driver
Information Display (DID) or the Uconnect® Settings in
your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
•The vehicle must be at a standstill.
•The parking brake must be unapplied.
•The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
While in service mode, the Electric Parking Brake fault
lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
•Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
•Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
•Apply the Electric Parking Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Information Provided by:
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system. This system includes Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions. Your vehicle is also equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
•Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors
the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come
on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is cycled to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required. See your authorized dealer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Information Provided by:
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
•The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
•Brake pedal pulsations.
•A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section of this manual.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
•The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter-
mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com-
pares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes:
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situa-
tions. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank above the
heater/air conditioning controls) or by shifting to “S” (if
equipped). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indi-
cator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability fea-
tures of ESC function normally, with the exception of
engine power reduction. This mode is intended to be
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch or by shifting out of “S” (if equipped). This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Off Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Information Provided by:
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•Vehicle must be stopped.
•Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
•Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in
the Uconnect® settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙in
⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙for further infor-
mation.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Information Provided by:
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is cycled ON.
•Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Information Provided by:
•Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
R= Construction code
–⬙R⬙means radial construction, or
–⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Information Provided by:
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Information Provided by:
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Information Provided by:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
•If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
•Safety and Vehicle Stability
•Economy
•Tread Wear
•Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Information Provided by:
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
•Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
•Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Information Provided by:
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the “all
season” designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Information Provided by:
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Information Provided by:
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Information Provided by:
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16” (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•Driving style
•Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
•Distance driven
•Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
•Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
•Install on front tires only.
•For a 215/55R17 tire on a 17 x 7.0J x 41mm wheel, use
of a snow traction device with a maximum projection
of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
•Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
•Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Information Provided by:
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
•The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light.”
•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Information Provided by:
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the matching full-size spare in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and
⬙Inflate to XX⬙messages will turn on upon the next
ignition cycle.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale Light,” as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full
Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare
tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙messages will turn on
upon the next ignition cycle.
3.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
Information Provided by:
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires.
A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will
not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
illuminate or the chime to sound when it is stored in the
spare tire location. However, it will cause a “SPARE LOW
PRESSURE” message to display in the DID.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Driver Information
Display (DID) will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message and
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
DID will return to their original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a
⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Information Provided by:
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will turn on upon the next ignition cycle. In
addition, the DID will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure
value in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires.
4. The DID will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in the same color as the other pressure
values in place of the different color low tire pressure
value. The DID will also display a “SPARE LOW
PRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat
tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a
different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Information Provided by:
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the DID will display a “SERVICE
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States KR55WY9012
Canada 7812D-5WY9012
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifi-
cations if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
Information Provided by:
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•Operate in a lean mode.
•OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
•Poor engine performance.
•Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
•Change the engine oil and oil filter.
•Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
Information Provided by:
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Information Provided by:
E-85 Fuel Cap E-85 Badge
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling.
•You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Information Provided by:
•Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap
has been designed for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
•Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
•Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
•A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
•To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (9
o’clock position) and release to open.
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the fuel filler cap and hang fuel filler cap by
tether on fuel fill door to prevent damage to body side.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the center-rear edge
(9 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then
release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
•In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the
ice build up.
•When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
•Tighten the fuel filler cap about one quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the fuel
filler cap is properly tightened.
Fuel Filler Door and Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1 — Fuel Filler Door Actuator
2 — Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Information Provided by:
•If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the fuel filler cap is tightened
every time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs,
tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability
does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
Information Provided by:
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing for front-wheel drive models is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
Information Provided by:
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer
unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........549
䡵IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............549
䡵WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................550
▫Torque Specifications ...................550
䡵TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........552
▫Tire Service Kit Storage .................552
▫Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .554
▫Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions..........554
▫Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........557
䡵JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........562
▫Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........563
▫Preparations For Jacking ................565
▫Jacking Instructions ...................566
▫Road Tire Installation...................573
䡵JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........576
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ..............576
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ................578
䡵FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............580
䡵MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................581
6
Information Provided by:
䡵TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........584
▫Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models .........585
▫All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ...........586
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank below the radio screen.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•On the highways — slow down.
•In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under an access cover in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Pull Strap
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the fastener securing the Tire Service Kit. 4. Remove Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Fastener Tire Service Kit
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
Information Provided by:
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
•Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on
bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
•The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
•When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
•For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
•You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
•Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
•Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
•A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
•Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-
tion.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
Information Provided by:
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
•Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
•After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1.
Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
•The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3.
Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
Information Provided by:
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
•The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
•Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
Information Provided by:
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access
the jack, wheel chocks and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire. 4. Remove the scissors jack, wheel bolt wrench and
wheel chocks from the spare wheel as an assembly.
Remove the chocks from the jack assembly. Turn the
jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
Pull Strap Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
Information Provided by:
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
•Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
Information Provided by:
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
Front Body Flange
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Rear Body Flange Front Body Flange Engaged 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
Information Provided by:
5. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the
jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, center-
ing the jack saddle between the locating notches on the
sill flange.
6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Rear Body Flange Engaged Front Jacking Location
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
•Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Securely stow
the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Release the
parking brake before driving the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
Information Provided by:
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel bolt
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
Information Provided by:
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
Information Provided by:
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
Information Provided by:
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is under-
neath the rubber storage bin liner in the center console
pass-through.
3. Unsnap the tether from the Manual Park Release lever,
and use it to pull the lever upwards.
Manual Park Release location
Manual Park Release Cover
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
4. Pull the tether to rotate the lever up and rearward,
until it locks vertically in place. Verify that the Manual
Park Release lever is locked in the released position.
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Manual Park Release Tether Locked Position 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
Information Provided by:
To reset the Manual Park Release:
1. Pull the tether upwards to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down to its original position.
3. Re-install the access cover and the rubber storage bin
liner.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
•Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........589
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........590
䡵
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .591
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............591
䡵EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................592
䡵REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................593
䡵DEALER SERVICE ......................593
䡵MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........594
▫Engine Oil ..........................595
▫Engine Oil Filter ......................598
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................598
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ...............599
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance .............601
▫Body Lubrication .....................605
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ...............605
▫Adding Washer Fluid ..................606
▫Exhaust System ......................607
▫Cooling System ......................609
▫Brake System ........................615
7
Information Provided by:
▫Automatic Transmission ................617
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................619
䡵FUSES ..............................625
▫Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ..........626
▫Interior Fuses ........................635
䡵VEHICLE STORAGE ....................636
䡵REPLACEMENT BULBS .................637
䡵BULB REPLACEMENT ..................639
▫Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps .....639
▫Front Turn Signal Lamp ................642
▫Front Side Marker Lamps ...............644
▫Front Fog Lamp ......................645
▫Backup Lamps (Passenger Side) ...........646
▫Backup Lamps (Driver Side) ..............648
▫Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp .............649
▫License Plate Lamp ....................650
䡵FLUID CAPACITIES ....................651
䡵FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................652
▫Engine .............................652
▫Chassis ............................655
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Information Provided by:
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
•The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
•The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Information Provided by:
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is
at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at
the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Information Provided by:
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Information Provided by:
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Information Provided by:
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf —
If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
out and lift up.
Console Closeout Panel Hush Panel 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Information Provided by:
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-
tors.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
Air Filter Cover Location A/C Air Filter
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Information Provided by:
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Information Provided by:
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Information Provided by:
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
•Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
•Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
•Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Information Provided by:
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-
12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Information Provided by:
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Information Provided by:
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•Stone and gravel impact.
•Insects, tree sap and tar.
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
•Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Special Care
•If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
•To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not
use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total
Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Information Provided by:
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
•When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
•If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – – Not Used
F08 25 Amp Clear – Engine Control Module (ECM) / Fuel Inj.
F09 – – Not Used
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
F11 – – Not Used
F12 20 Amp Yellow – Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
F13 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM) / VSM (Stop/
Start Only)
F14 10 Amp Red – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped / RDM /
Brake System Module (BSM) / Brake Pedal S.
F15 – – Not Used
F16 20 Amp Yellow – Powertrain / Ignition Coil
F17 – – Not Used
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F18 – – Not Used
F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan Enable
F23 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 2
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2 – If
Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F24 – – Not Used
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – Front Washer Pump – If Equipped with Stop/
Start Option
F26 – – Not Used
F27 – – Not Used
F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM)
F29 – – Not Used
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F30 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM) / EPS
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 – 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan PWM Controller
F38 – – Not Used
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1 – If
Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F41 — 60 Amp Yellow Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 1
F42 – – Not Used
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F44 – – Not Used
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If Equipped
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof – If Equipped
F47 – – Not Used
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module (DDM)
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V A/C) – If Equipped
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Windshield Wiper Smart Motor (WWSM)
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – – Not Used
F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module BSM & Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors/Compass/Rearview
Camera – If Equipped
F56 15 Amp Blue – Ignition Node Module (IGNM) / RF Hub
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F57 – – Not Used
F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/Voltage Sta-
bility Module (VSM) #2 – If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console
F61 – – Not Used
F62 – – Not Used
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
F65 10 Amp Red – In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
F66 15 Amp Blue – Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Electronic Cli-
mate Control (ECC)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F67 10 Amp Red – In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped
F68 – – Not Used
F69 10 Amp Red – Gear Shift Module (GSM)/Active Grill Shutter
(AGS). – If Equipped / EPB SW
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) – If Equipped
with Stop/Start Option
F71 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Right – If Equipped with
Stop/Start Option
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
F73 – – Not Used
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster/Defogger
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter
F76 10 Amp Red – Drivers Window SW– If Equipped
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F77 10 Amp Red – UCI Port/Brake Pedal Switch
F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port/Steering Column Control
Module (SCCM)
F79 10 Amp Red – Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Switch Bank/
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/EPB SW
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83 – 20 Amp Blue Engine Control Module (ECM)
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
F85 – – Not Used
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine
Option
F87A 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Left – If Equipped Stop/Start
Only
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F88 10 Amp Red – Collision Mitigation Module (CMM)/
Electrochromatic Mirror/Haptic Lane Feed-
back Module (Half)/Humidity Sensor– If
Equipped
F89 – – Not Used
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – – Not Used
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor –
If Equipped
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
F95 10 Amp Red – Electrochromatic Mirror/Rain/Pass. Window
SW/Power Outlet Console Illumination/
Sensor/Sunroof – If Equipped
F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger com-
partment on the left side dash panel under the instru-
ment panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module / Siren
F37 7.5 Amp Brown Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
F38 20 Amp Yellow All Doors Lock/Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Information Provided by:
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F48 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
F91 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
•Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Visor Vanity Lamp A6220
Glove Box Lamp A6220
Shift Indicator Lamp IKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Information Provided by:
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Bi-Halogen Headlamp HIR2
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24W SV
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21W
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp 921
License Lamp W5W
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Rotate the screw on the headlamp access door in the
wheel liner to access headlamp assembly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
Information Provided by:
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
Access Door Headlamp Bulb Cap
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Information Provided by:
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous-
ing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Lock headlamp access door in wheel liner.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the lamp assembly
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the beauty cover, by removing the 10 push
pins.
3. Remove the brace by removing the four fasteners and
loosening the 5th inboard fastener.
4. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
Beauty Cover
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
6. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
8. Install brace, brace bolts and tighten as shown.
9. Install beauty cover.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
Brace Bolt Tightening Sequence
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Information Provided by:
Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the three fasteners from the lower closeout,
and peel down the lower closeout.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
Lower Closeout Front Fog Lamp Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Position the lower closeout panel in place and secure
with the three fasteners.
Backup Lamps (Passenger Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the passenger side access cover.
3. Remove the inner trunk lid handle cover.
4. Remove the two screws and remove the inner trunk
lid handle.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
5. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
6. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
lid lamp housing.
Backup Lamp Socket
7. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
8. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
Inner Deck Panel 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Information Provided by:
9. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
10. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
11. Install access cover.
Backup Lamps (Driver Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the drivers side access cover.
3. Remove inner deck lid support push pin.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
4. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
NOTE: passenger side shown the drivers side is similar.
Backup Lamp Socket
5. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
lid lamp housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
7. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
8. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
9. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
10. Install the access cover.
Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the tail lamp housing beauty cover by grasp-
ing the top edge and pulling rearward to expose the
tail lamp housing bolts.
3. Remove the tail lamp housing bolts
Tail Lamp Beauty Cover 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Information Provided by:
4. Pull the tail lamp housing directly rearward to dis-
lodge the two out bored ball studs from the socket
fasteners.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use significant force to
remove the two out bored ball studs from the socket
fasteners to remove the tail lamp housing.
5. Rotate the stop/rear turn signal lamp socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
7.
Install the bulb socket into the tail lamp housing and
rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the tail lamp housing.
9. Install the tail lamp housing beauty cover.
License Plate Lamp
1. Remove the screw of the license plate lamp assembly
and pull down on the license plate lamp assembly to
remove.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
3. Install the license plate lamp assembly.
Tail Lamp Bolts
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.6L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
8.7 Quarts 8.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Information Provided by:
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma-
terial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma-
terial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87-89 Octane
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............658 ▫Maintenance Chart ....................660
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Information Provided by:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-
ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
658 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•Check engine oil level.
•Check windshield washer fluid level.
•Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
•Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
•Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Change oil and filter
•Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
•Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
•Inspect exhaust system
•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions 8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 659
Information Provided by:
Maintenance Chart
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary. XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine ** X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
660 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first. XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 661
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
•Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................665
▫Prepare For The Appointment.............665
▫Prepare A List ........................665
▫Be Reasonable With Requests .............665
䡵IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............665
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center.......666
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......666
▫In Mexico Contact:.....................667
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................667
▫Service Contract ......................667
䡵WARRANTY INFORMATION .............668
䡵MOPAR®PARTS.......................669
䡵REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............669
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .669
▫In Canada...........................669
䡵PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............670
9
Information Provided by:
䡵DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................671
▫Treadwear...........................671
▫Traction Grades .......................671
▫Temperature Grades....................672
664 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 665
Information Provided by:
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
•If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•Owner’s name and address
•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•Authorized dealer name
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247–9753
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
666 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 667
Information Provided by:
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
668 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–
424–9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 669
Information Provided by:
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
Call toll free at:
•1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
INDEX
10
Information Provided by:
About Your Brakes ........................481
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................482
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .182
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............611
Additives, Fuel ...........................533
Airbag.................................60
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag ....................61
Air Bag Components .....................60
Air bag Operation .......................64
Air Bag Warning Light ....................65
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................75
Enhanced Accident Response ................81
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................85
FrontAirBag...........................60
Front Passenger Knee Air bag ...............75
If A Deployment Occurs ...................80
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................74
Lighter Weight Passengers ..................69
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............84
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) ........66
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............83
Side Air Bags ...........................75
Transporting Pets .......................108
Air bag Deployment ........................60
Air bag Light .............................82
Air bag Maintenance........................84
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .598
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................601
Air Conditioning..........................400
Air Conditioning Controls ...................400
Air Conditioning Filter .....................421
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............420
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................601
Air Conditioning System ....................400
Air Filter ...............................598
Air Pressure, Tires.........................506
674 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Alarm
Arm The System ........................19
Disarm The System .......................19
Rearming The System .....................18
Tamper Alert ...........................20
Vehicle Security Alarm ....................18
Alarm, Panic .............................24
Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................331
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................470
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................610
Disposal ..............................613
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................482
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................328
Appearance Care .........................619
Assist, Hill Start ..........................490
Auto Down Power Windows ..................42
Automatic Door Locks ......................33
Automatic Headlights ......................160
Automatic High Beams .....................162
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........419
Automatic Transaxle .......................457
Automatic Transmission ....................460
Adding Fluid ..........................619
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................619
Fluid Change ..........................619
Fluid Level Check .......................617
Fluid Type ............................617
Special Additives .......................618
Autostick ...............................468
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................34
Auto Up Power Windows ....................43
Axle Lubrication ..........................655
Battery.................................599
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........25
Remote Battery Replacement ................25
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............25
10
INDEX 675
Information Provided by:
Belts, Seat ...............................111
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................605
B-Pillar Location ..........................499
Brake Assist System .......................486
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............482
Brake Fluid .............................655
Brake System ............................481
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................481
Fluid Check ...........................615
Master Cylinder ........................615
Warning Light .........................323
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................459
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................168
Bulb Replacement .........................637
Bulbs, Light .............................113
Camera, Rear ............................274
Capacities, Fluid ..........................651
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................539
Oil (Engine) ...........................589
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................613
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..................110
Cargo Area Features .......................310
Cargo Compartment .......................310
Car Washes .............................620
Cellular Phone ...........................399
Certification Label.........................542
Chains, Tire .............................516
Changing A Flat Tire .......................562
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................494
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .592
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............109
Checks, Safety ...........................109
Child Restraint ............................86
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................91
676 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Center Seat LATCH ......................100
Child Restraints .........................86
Child Seat Installation ....................103
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......101
Infants And Child Restraints ................89
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . .100
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................102
LATCH Positions ........................95
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............98
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......94
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........89
Seating Positions ........................93
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ............106
Child Safety Locks .........................34
Clean Air Gasoline ........................531
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................621
Climate Control ..........................400
Coin Holder .............................306
Cold Weather Operation ....................449
Compact Spare Tire ........................511
Console, Floor ...........................306
Console, Overhead ........................277
Contract, Service ..........................667
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........613
Cooling System...........................609
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............611
Coolant Capacity .......................651
Coolant Level ..........................614
Disposal of Used Coolant .................613
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................610
Inspection ............................609
Points to Remember .....................614
Pressure Cap ..........................613
Radiator Cap ..........................613
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............610
Corrosion Protection .......................619
10
INDEX 677
Information Provided by:
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................182
Cupholders .............................303
Customer Assistance .......................665
Data Recorder, Event .......................85
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............169
Daytime Running Lights ....................163
Dealer Service............................593
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................46
Deck Lid, Power Release .....................45
Defroster, Rear Window.....................314
Defroster, Windshield ......................111
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................591
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................166
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................595
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................584
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................613
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......34
Door Locks ............................24
KeyFob...............................31
Key Fob Emergency Key ...................25
Manual Door Locks ......................31
Power Door Locks .......................32
Remote ...............................31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................31
Door Locks, Automatic ......................33
Door Opener, Garage.......................281
Driver Information Display (DID)
Controls ..............................356
Display ..............................356
Driver Information Display (DID) ............356
Instrument Cluster ......................356
Messages .............................346
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................146
678 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................472
E-85 Fuel ...............................535
Electrical Power Outlets.....................299
Electric Parking Brake ......................475
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................314
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................131
Electronic Brake Control System ...............482
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............485
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........178
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............487
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......274
Change Engine Oil ......................345
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .333
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Menu ................................333
EVIC Display ..........................333
EVIC Messages .........................346
Selectable Menu Items ....................349
Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................46
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................549
Jacking ...............................562
Jump Starting ..........................576
Overheating ...........................549
Towing ..............................584
Emergency Trunk Release ....................46
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........592
Engine .................................589
Air Cleaner ...........................598
Block Heater ..........................456
Break-In Recommendations ................108
Checking Oil Level ......................595
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................652
Cooling ..............................609
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................110
10
INDEX 679
Information Provided by:
Fails to Start ...........................450
Flooded, Starting .......................450
Fuel Requirements ......................531
Jump Starting ..........................576
Oil..................................595
Oil Filler Cap ..........................589
Oil Filter .............................598
Oil Selection ...........................596
Oil Synthetic ..........................597
Overheating ...........................549
Starting ..............................448
Temperature Gauge ......................331
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................597
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................597
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............81
Entry System, Illuminated ....................21
Ethanol ................................532
Event Data Recorder ........................85
Exhaust Gas Caution .......................110
Exhaust System...........................110
Exterior Lighting..........................159
Exterior Lights ...........................113
Fabric Care..............................623
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................598
Air Conditioning .......................421
Engine Oil ............................598
Engine Oil Disposal .....................598
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................549
Turn Signal ............................113
Flash-To-Pass ............................166
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................538
Engine Oil ............................538
Fuel Requirements ......................535
Maintenance ...........................539
680 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Replacement Parts .......................539
Starting ..............................538
Flooded Engine Starting ....................450
Floor Console ............................306
Fluid, Brake .............................655
Fluid Capacities ..........................651
Fluid Leaks .............................113
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ................................615
Engine Oil ............................595
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........652
Fog Lights ..............................164
Fog Light Service .........................645
Folding Rear Seat .........................152
Forward Collision Warning ..................209
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................580
Front Position Light .......................644
Fuel...................................531
Additives .............................533
Clean Air .............................531
Ethanol ..............................532
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................539
Gasoline ..............................531
Gauge ...............................329
Materials Added ........................533
Methanol .............................532
Octane Rating ..........................531
Requirements ..........................531
Specifications ..........................652
Tank Capacity ..........................651
Fuel, Flexible ............................535
Fuses ..................................625
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............281
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................539
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................531
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................531
10
INDEX 681
Information Provided by:
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................331
Fuel .................................329
Speedometer ..........................324
Tachometer ............................331
Gear Ranges .............................461
General Information .......................400
Glass Cleaning ...........................624
GVWR .................................542
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................472
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................549
Headlights
Automatic ............................160
Bulb Replacement .......................639
Cleaning .............................624
Delay ................................161
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........166
Lights On Reminder .....................163
On With Wipers ........................161
Passing ..............................166
Replacing .............................639
Switch ...............................159
Time Delay ............................161
Head Restraints ..........................149
Heated Mirrors ...........................132
Heater .................................400
Heater, Engine Block .......................456
High Beam Indicator .......................329
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .166
Hill Start Assist...........................490
Holder, Coin.............................306
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............281
Ignition
Key..................................12
682 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Illuminated Entry ..........................21
Courtesy Lights .........................21
Front Courtesy Overhead Console ............21
Illuminated Entry ........................21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter .......21
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................122
Instrument Cluster ........................321
Instrument Cluster ......................345
Instrument Panel and Controls ................320
Instrument Panel Cover .....................623
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............624
Interior Appearance Care....................623
Interior Fuses ............................635
Interior Lights ...........................168
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............172
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................302
Jacking Instructions........................566
Jack Location ............................563
Jack Operation ...........................562
Jump Starting ............................576
Key Fob
Emergency Key .........................13
Lock The Doors .........................24
Panic Alarm ............................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........18
Programming Additional Transmitters .........18
Remote Battery Replacement ................25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................13
Unlatch The Trunk .......................24
Unlock The Doors .......................23
Key-In Reminder ..........................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Enter The Trunk .........................24
KeyFob...............................36
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ .....................36
10
INDEX 683
Information Provided by:
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................24
Passive Entry ...........................36
Passive Entry Programming .................36
Remote Control .........................36
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ..............23
Unlock From The Passenger Side .............23
Keyless Entry System .......................22
Keyless Go...............................12
Keys ...................................12
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................165
Lane Change Assist........................166
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................50
Latches ................................113
Lead Free Gasoline ........................531
Leaks, Fluid .............................113
Life of Tires .............................514
Light Bulbs..............................113
Light Replacement ........................637
Lights .................................113
Airbag ................................82
Anti-Lock .............................328
Automatic Headlights ....................160
Battery Saver ..........................170
Brake Assist Warning ....................491
Brake Warning .........................323
Bulb Replacement .......................639
Daytime Running .......................163
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................165
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .....491
Exterior ..............................113
Fog .................................164
Front Replacement ......................644
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................549
Headlights ............................159
Headlights On Reminder ..................163
Headlights On With Wipers ................161
Headlight Switch .......................159
684 INDEX
Information Provided by:
High Beam ............................166
High Beam Indicator .....................329
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............166
Illuminated Entry ........................21
Instrument Cluster ......................159
Intensity Control ........................168
Interior ..............................168
License ..............................650
Lights On Reminder .....................163
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........329
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........169
Passing ..............................166
Reading ..............................166
Seat Belt Reminder ......................325
Security Alarm .........................331
Service ...............................639
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .329
Side Marker ...........................642
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............326
Traction Control ........................491
Turn Signal ............................113
Vanity Mirror ..........................132
Loading Vehicle ..........................542
Tires ................................499
Locks ..................................31
Automatic Door .........................33
Auto Unlock ...........................34
Child Protection .........................34
Door .................................31
Power Door ............................32
Low Tire Pressure System ...................519
Lubrication, Body .........................605
Lug Nuts ...............................550
Maintenance Free Battery....................599
Maintenance Procedures ....................594
Maintenance Schedule ......................658
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......329
10
INDEX 685
Information Provided by:
Manual, Service ..........................670
Marker Lights, Side........................642
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................615
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............153
Memory Seat ............................153
Memory Seats and Radio ....................153
Methanol ...............................532
Mirrors ................................122
Electric Powered ........................131
Electric Remote .........................131
Exterior Folding ........................130
Heated ...............................132
Outside ..............................129
Rearview .............................122
Vanity ...............................132
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................519
MOPAR® Parts...........................593
MTBE/ETBE ............................532
Multi-Function Control Lever.................165
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................108
Occupant Restraints ........................47
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................531
Odometer...............................332
Trip.................................332
Oil, Engine ..............................595
Capacity .............................651
Change Interval ........................596
Checking .............................595
Dipstick ..............................595
Disposal ..............................598
Filter ................................598
Filter Disposal .........................598
Identification Logo ......................596
Materials Added to ......................597
Recommendation .......................596
686 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Synthetic .............................597
Viscosity .............................597
Oil Filter, Change .........................598
Oil Filter, Selection ........................598
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................591
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............281
Operating Precautions ......................591
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................129
Overhead Console.........................277
Overheating, Engine .......................331
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............4
Paint Care ..............................619
Panic Alarm ..............................24
Parking Brake............................475
ParkSense® System, Rear....................221
Passing Light ............................166
Pets ...................................108
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........500
Power
Brakes ...............................481
Deck Lid Release ........................45
Door Locks ............................32
Mirrors ..............................131
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........299
Sunroof ..............................290
Windows ..............................41
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................57
Preparation for Jacking .....................565
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................57
Radial Ply Tires ..........................507
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........613
Radio Operation ..........................399
Radio Remote Controls .....................398
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................397
10
INDEX 687
Information Provided by:
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................175
Rear Camera ............................274
Rear Cupholder ..........................304
Rear ParkSense System .....................221
Rear Seat, Folding .........................152
Rear Window Defroster .....................314
Rear Window Features .....................314
Recorder, Event Data .......................85
Recreational Towing .......................545
Reformulated Gasoline .....................531
Refrigerant ..............................602
Reminder, Lights On .......................163
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................49
Remote Control
Starting System .........................27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
FCC General Information ..................27
Lock The Doors .........................24
Panic Alarm ............................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........18
Programming Additional Transmitters .........18
Remote Battery Replacement ................25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................13
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............25
Unlatch The Trunk .......................24
Unlock The Doors .......................23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........398
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode ..................29
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message ............29
Exit Remote Start Mode ...................30
How To Use Remote Start ..................28
Remote Starting System ...................27
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................30
Remote Starting System......................27
Remote Trunk Release.......................45
Replacement Bulbs ........................637
688 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Replacement Parts.........................593
Replacement Tires .........................515
Reporting Safety Defects ....................669
Restraint, Head...........................149
Restraints, Child...........................86
Restraints, Occupant ........................47
Rotation, Tires ...........................518
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................111
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................113
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................669
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................110
Safety Information, Tire .....................493
Safety Tips ..............................109
Schedule, Maintenance .....................658
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......55
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........58
BeltAlert® .............................48
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode .......60
Energy Management Feature ................57
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode .........59
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................53
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................50
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............55
Pregnant Women ........................57
Seat Belt Extender .......................56
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................57
Seat Belt Reminder .......................49
Seat Belt System .........................47
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................625
Seat Belt Reminder .........................49
Seat Belts ................................48
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................55
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........55
And Pregnant Women .....................57
Child Restraint ..........................86
Extender ..............................56
10
INDEX 689
Information Provided by:
Front Seat .............................48
Inspection .............................111
Operating Instructions ....................53
Pretensioners ...........................57
Rear Seat ..............................50
Reminder .............................325
Untwisting Procedure .....................55
Seats ..................................142
Adjustment ...........................142
Easy Entry ............................156
Memory ..............................153
Rear Folding ..........................152
Seatback Release ........................146
Tilting ...............................146
Security Alarm ...........................331
Arm The System ........................19
Disarm The System .......................19
Rearming The System .....................18
Security Alarm ..........................18
Tamper Alert ...........................20
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)...............652
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................18
Immobilizer ............................16
Key Programming .......................18
Replacement Keys .......................17
Service Assistance .........................665
Service Contract ..........................667
Service Manuals ..........................670
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ..................460
Shoulder Belts ............................50
Side View Mirror Adjustment.................129
Signals, Turn.............................113
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................516
Snow Tires ..............................509
Spare Tire...............................511
Spark Plugs .............................652
690 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................652
Oil..................................652
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................178
Speedometer.............................324
Starting .................................27
Cold Weather ..........................449
Engine Fails to Start .....................450
Remote ...............................27
Starting and Operating .....................448
Starting Procedures ........................448
Steering
Column Controls .......................165
Column Lock ..........................176
Tilt Column ...........................176
Wheel, Heated .........................177
Wheel, Tilt ............................176
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............398
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .398
Storage ................................636
Storage, Vehicle...........................421
Storing Your Vehicle .......................636
Stuck, Freeing............................580
Sunglasses Storage ........................279
Sun Roof ...............................290
Sun Visor Extension .......................133
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........61
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................597
System, Remote Starting .....................27
Tachometer..............................331
Telescoping Steering Column .................176
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........419
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............331
Tilt Steering Column .......................176
Time Delay, Headlight ......................161
Tip Start................................449
Tire and Loading Information Placard ...........499
10
INDEX 691
Information Provided by:
Tire Markings ............................493
Tires ..................................113
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................514
Air Pressure ...........................504
Chains ...............................516
Changing .............................562
Compact Spare .........................511
General Information .....................504
High Speed ...........................507
Inflation Pressures .......................506
Jacking ...............................562
Life of Tires ...........................514
Load Capacity .........................499
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............349
Pressure Warning Light ...................326
Quality Grading ........................671
Radial ...............................507
Replacement ...........................515
Rotation ..............................518
Safety ...............................493
Sizes ................................494
Snow Tires ............................509
Spare Tire .............................563
Spinning .............................513
Tread Wear Indicators ....................513
Tire Safety Information .....................493
Tire Service Kit ...........................552
To Open Hood ...........................157
Towing ................................544
Disabled Vehicle ........................584
Recreational ...........................545
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........545
Traction ................................471
Trailer Towing ...........................544
Transaxle ...............................457
Automatic ............................457
Autostick .............................468
Operation .............................457
692 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Transmission ............................460
Automatic ............................460
Maintenance ...........................617
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .281
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........22
Transporting Pets .........................108
Tread Wear Indicators ......................513
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .......................45
Trunk Release, Emergency ....................46
Trunk Release Remote Control .................45
Turn Signals .............................165
Uconnect®
Operation .............................397
Uconnect® Settings .......................23
Uconnect® Settings.........................23
Uconnect® Voice Command..................423
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................671
Universal Transmitter ......................281
Unleaded Gasoline ........................531
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................55
Upholstery Care ..........................623
Vanity Mirrors ...........................132
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ..........................501
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Storage ...........................421
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................597
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................549
Warnings and Cautions.......................6
Warranty Information ......................668
Washers, Windshield .......................170
Washing Vehicle ..........................620
10
INDEX 693
Information Provided by:
Water
Driving Through ........................472
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................621
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................621
Wind Buffeting............................44
Window Fogging .........................421
Windows ................................41
Auto Down ............................42
Driver/Passenger Window Controls ...........41
Express Up And Down ....................43
Power ................................41
Power Windows .........................41
Rear Passenger Window Controls .............41
Reset Auto-Up ..........................44
Wind Buffeting ..........................44
Window Controls ........................41
Window Lockout ........................44
Windshield Defroster .......................111
Windshield Washers .......................170
Fluid ................................606
Windshield Wiper Blades....................605
Windshield Wipers ........................170
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................605
Wipers, Intermittent .......................172
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................175
Wrecker Towing ..........................584
694 INDEX
Information Provided by:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Information Provided by:
200
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL

2015 200
15UF-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A.
Information Provided by:

Navigation menu